Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. 1 .Introduction In this tutorial. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. and plumbing engineering workflows. 3 . and plumbing fixtures. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. electrical panels. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. such as mechanical equipment. Add more detailed modelling elements. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. such as duct. fixtures. Add basic MEP elements. Germany. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and piping. electrical. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials.

templates. NOTE Depending on your installation. and sheets to document the project. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. So. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Create detail views. However. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. In this exercise. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. After completing each exercise. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Create schedules. and tags. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. when you add ductwork. you can choose to save your work. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. When you open a training file. For example. For example. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. to provide a richer and more finished design. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you learn where the training files are located. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. You do not design entire systems. such as templates and families. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. is located and accessed in the training files location. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. your Training folder may be in a different location. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . When you install the training files as instructed. On the Contents tab. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Contact your CAD manager for more information. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. annotations. Metric: files for users working with metric units. as well as how to open and save them. views. however.

rvt and make changes. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 8 If you have made changes. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. enter the new file name. if you open settings. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. select the folder in which to save the new file. Accessing Training Files | 5 .rvt) is selected. 4 Click the training file name. For Files of type. and you can open any supported file type. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. a list of file types displays. double-click Imperial or Metric. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Save. you are prompted to save the changes. click ➤ Save As. You may close the file with or without saving changes. the Open dialog displays. and click the Training Files icon. For File name. For example.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. scroll down. verify that Project Files (*. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.rvt. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. and click Open. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. 3 In the right pane.

6 .

the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. If you move the partition. the operation of the software is parametric. You learn the terminology. and phases when you need it. scope. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the door retains this relationship to the partition. every drawing sheet. hence. drawings. schedules. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. quantities. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the parameter is one of association or connection. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the floor or roof remains connected. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and schedules required for a building project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In the Revit MEP model. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the hierarchy of elements. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and plans. drawing sheets. In this case. ■ ■ 7 . Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. 2D and 3D view. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. If the length of the elevation is changed. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. sections.

sinks. tags. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ducts. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. sprinklers. walls and ceilings are hosts. dimensions. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. ducts. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and reference planes are datum elements. tags. boilers. and 2D detail components. For example. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They help to describe or document the design. grids.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and electrical panels. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. boilers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sprinklers. dimensions. When you change something. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Examples include detail lines. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. levels. For example. filled regions. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. They display in relevant views of the design. and electrical panels. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . sinks. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Datum elements help to define project context. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do.

by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. for example. first floor. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. or bottom of foundation. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Project: In Revit MEP. top of wall. Often. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. families. such as roofs. To place levels. and types. you do nothing to establish these relationships. you can explicitly control them. elevation views. North .This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Most often. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. The project file contains all information for the building design. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. By using a single project file. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. floors. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. section views. programming is not required. In other cases. schedules. However. If you can draw. you must be in a section or elevation view. and ceilings. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . For example. and so forth). from geometry to construction data. and drawings of the design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. In Revit MEP. views of the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. This information includes components used to design the model. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals.

For example. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Then experiment with them. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and wires. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. identical use. For example. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). A type can also be a style. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can also display several project views at one time. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. With a few clicks. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family. System families can be transferred between projects. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and similar graphical representation. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Unlike system and standard component families. hiding. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. However. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. showing. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. System families include ducts. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. pipes. each in-place family contains only a single type.

Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To return the panel to the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs.

. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. data and systems. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. then select what you want to modify. and settings. select the tool first. project and system parameters.. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools used for editing existing elements. architect-specific tools. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and for switching views. When working on the Modify tab. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and CAD files.

provides access to common tools. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). when adding duct. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. For example. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides requested information. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays frequently used tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. By default. closes the application menu (double-click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.

Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a file to open.. click. select a template and create a new drawing. (Open) save the current drawing. (Export) On the application menu... (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.

On the application menu. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. family. (Publish) print the current drawing. click. annotation. but is not enabled by default. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. saves a current project.. (Print) access product and license information. family.. publish the current project. or template file. (Licensing) close the file. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. and Walkthrough.. or template file. Camera. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. to. To enable or disable a tool item. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . provides views including Default 3D. annotation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.

check the Status Bar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). repeat the command. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. However. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . To show the Status Bar again. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Clipboard. When you are highlighting an element or component. When you are using a command. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. This displays the command history in a list. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. In addition. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. or the Family Editor. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Clear the Status Bar check mark. when you switch to another editing mode. Group. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar.To undo or redo a series of operations. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Modify. Starting with the most recent command. displaying the same information. workshared components. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. To hide the Status Bar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components.

click (Modify). To change existing elements to a different type. Place a Wall. When you place an element in a drawing. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 .To cancel or exit the current command. On the Quick Access toolbar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. select one or more elements of the same category. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. for example. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar.

) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.rvt. 1 Click ➤ Open. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. click Training Files. There are several ways to access zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Zoom the view In the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.

and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. NOTE As you zoom in and out. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 6 Click in the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. To modify or add snap increments. In the drawing area. 9 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms in on the selected area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click . use a zoom menu command to zoom out. on the Navigation bar. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. Modifying the View | 19 . this is referred to as a crossing selection.

moving the wheel to the desired location. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. and click tin the Options dialog. and then using the Zoom tool again. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. As you move the mouse. ➤ Options. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. press ESC. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Click and drag to orbit the design. To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

Similar controls.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. These are the drag controls. 2 Enter ZR.HVAC Plan . referred to as shape handles. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. and select the duct. display along the ends. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. bottoms.Design. as shown. Small blue dots. called drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you are familiar with these tasks. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and open Level 2 .

moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. on the Standard toolbar. select the first item in the list. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move. 6 On the Undo menu. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. or press CTRL+Z. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).3 Click and drag the bottom control. In this example. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

click to specify the starting position. as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . In this case.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. for example. Some commands. such as Move and Copy. 11 With the duct already selected. require 2 clicks to complete the command. After selecting the element to move. and drag it to the left as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. and click again to specify the ending position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. you want to move the duct.

such as the Modify Ducts command.Supply. Select Mechanical . For example. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.End a command Some commands. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Press ESC twice. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 To end a command. Click OK. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Return. 14 Enter VG. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

use copy/monitor. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. create and manage views. link files. click Training files. system families. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. under Template file. such as coordination review and interference checking. select Project. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. In that case. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. the default building levels and standard views. you learn how to start a project from a template. You can choose from several templates. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. such as the default project units and settings. such as ducts and pipes. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. under Create new. 5 In the New Project dialog. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. Finally.rte template. 6 Click OK. and click Open.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. settings. click Browse. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and geometry from the starting template. and modify system settings. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. You can either select a template from the template library. 27 . New projects inherit all the families. 2 In the New Project dialog. and loadable families.

click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. for Energy Data. 10 Using the same method. click Edit.7 In the Project Browser. you can select it now. select Project template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Browse. create another new project using the Construction template. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. For example. select Manchester. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select Level 1. and open North. Click OK twice. select School or University. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. When you select the material.rte template and click Open. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. navigate to Imperial Templates. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. In the Choose Template dialog. ■ For Building Construction. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. under Energy Analysis. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. click (Browse). (Browse). Click Cancel. 8 In the drawing area. review the construction materials listed. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. For Location. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. NH. If you want to use a template other than the default. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Click OK. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. for City. ■ ■ Under Create new. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.

and 5 1/2". 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for 3/4". 27 Click OK. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. click Round. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. Click OK twice. 4 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 10 1/2". and 12 1/2". Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Holding CTRL. click Rectangular. 25 In the left pane. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. plumbing. under Duct Settings. under Duct Settings. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. power distribution systems. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 5 1/2". piping. 24 In the right pane. and demand factors for electrical systems. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. for 3 1/2". for 3 1/2". Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. click Wiring. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 11 1/2". ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected.rfa and click Open. After standard settings have been established for an organization. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. wiring. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Views. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 22 In the right pane. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. select Identity Data. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 33 Click OK.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. click Sizes. and fire protection systems. 23 In the left pane. 4 1/2". For Categories. 26 In the right pane. under Pipe Settings.

7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization.rvt. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select Auto . Click Open. under Create new. families. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. In addition. select View Name. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 5 Click OK. and groups that are contained in a project. For Then by. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. click Browse. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. To enable this coordination.Origin to Origin. select Project. For Sort by. select Family and Type. select Sub-Discipline. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. Linking Projects In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. select Associated Level. 38 Close the file. Notice that the file is saved as a template. under Template file.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. From the Positioning list. click Training. 4 In the New Project dialog. You need to create the MEP model for the project. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. For Then by. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. sheets.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click (Browse).11 In the Places dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. templates. click the My Library icon. or families. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click (Add Value). and change the name to My Library. and Import dialogs. and select it as the library path. ➤ Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click My Library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Load. and click OK twice. Save. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 15 Under Library Name. and click Open. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open.

you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 20 Click ➤ Options. (Remove Value) to delete the library. click Edit. click Places. click the Spelling tab. and decal image files. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 21 On the File Locations tab. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. custom color files. This path is determined during installation.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 3 Under Settings. click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 11 In the Options dialog. 19 Click Cancel. 9 In the text editor. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. such as bump maps. If you work in a large office. select Ignore words in uppercase. 5 In the text editor. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. 22 Select My Library. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 27 Click OK. If you want to relocate this path. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. specify the new location here. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 14 Click in the drawing area. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. click Edit. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. view the current path. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise.

24 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Restore Defaults. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 6 In the Snaps dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. As you zoom in and out within a view. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 18 Click ➤ Options. click File menu ➤ Save. 23 In the text editor. you modify snap settings. click OK. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Close. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 20 Under Settings. you modify snap increments. In this exercise. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 22 In the text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Template file. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . work with snapping turned off. 2 In the New Project dialog. and enter 1 . delete sheetmtl-CU. click Training Files. 25 Close the file without saving it. under Dimension Snaps.17 In the Spelling dialog. 19 In the Options dialog.. click Browse.rte. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Edit. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click the Spelling tab. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.

8 In the Snaps dialog. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. TIP To zoom while sketching. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. For example. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel button. enter SM. such as ZO to zoom out. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. If it does not. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. deselect Chain. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This is the increment that you added previously. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to the right.7 Under Object Snaps. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. While sketching. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. zoom out until it does so. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall.

and move the cursor to the right. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that snapping is once again active. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 26 Close the file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 25 Click OK. 22 Move the cursor downward. If you move the cursor along the wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. it will snap to the endpoints. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and delete the value 1’ . with or without saving it. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and specify the wall endpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.. 19 Enter SM. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and the wall edges.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

As you create the mechanical system. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you first plan the system. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. At the end of the tutorial. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you can choose to save your work. duct system and a hydronic piping system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. After finishing each exercise. 45 . This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.autodesk.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. methodology. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. If the tutorial training files are not present. This system consists of a cooling tower. you will understand the process. go to http://www. In this lesson. you first configure the linked architectural model. In this exercise. By following the recommended workflow. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. water source heat pump (WSHP). The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and then you create a plenum level. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design.

5 Press Esc to clear the selection. click to select it. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. In this section. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. click Training Files. and after the linked model highlights. and click OK. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. These components are defined in the architectural training file. you add a level for plenums.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Room Bounding. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. NOTE When working with a linked file. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . roof. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. ceilings.rvt. not in the MEP training file. Next.

and click OK. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. The new level is placed. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and double-click West . and in the Plan View Types dialog. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. Preparing Spaces | 47 .Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). For Offset. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Verify that Make Plan View is selected.MEP. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 16 Press Esc. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 9 On the Draw panel. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Click Plan View Types. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.6 In the Project Browser. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. enter 8'. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.

select Level Above (Level 3). You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. enter 0. and then place spaces in various types of areas. In the next exercise. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. you can choose to save your work.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for View Range. for Top. enter an Offset of 1' 0". ■ Click OK twice. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . Notice that the site plan displays in the view. and click Apply Default View Template. In this exercise. Under View Depth. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. select Plenum Plan. For Cut plane. Under Extents. for Level. for View Scale. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Under Identity Data. for Default View Template. 20 In the Project Browser. click Edit. NOTE After finishing each exercise. For Sub-Discipline.Plenum. and click Properties. In this exercise. and for Offset. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. select MEP . For View Classification. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. However. select Design. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Space. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. walls. and ceilings). select Horizontal. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Space Plan is highlighted. For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. enter 0. select New. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. For (Tag Location). 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. indicating that it’s the active view. select Level 2 Plenum. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Upper Limit. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.rvt. Placing Spaces | 49 . 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.

enter 219. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ensuring coordination between the files. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Number. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 9 Select the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). enter Library.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 14 In the drawing area.7 Click to place the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Name. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Click OK.

Placing Spaces | 51 .15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. For Upper Limit. enter 0. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 21 Using the method learned previously. select Level 3. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset. and then click Modify. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. enter 0. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. and then press Esc.Space Plan is highlighted. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. select Level 3.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Upper Limit. 5 On the Options Bar. and for Offset.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

double-click the space name. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 9 In the floor plan. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. which was numbered 219Q. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. as shown. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. change the space number to 216A. enter Corridor. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .7 In the Project Browser. 10 Using the same method. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and press Enter. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and scroll to the newly placed space. In the schedule. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Close the schedule view.

The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 16 Using the method learned previously. place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan is highlighted. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. you place a space in a chase. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

enter 4'. select Level 3. and then click OK. for Name. enter 225PC. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . select Roof Level. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. For Number. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Interior and Reference. and click Element Properties. enter 0. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. For Offset. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Under Identity Data. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. click in the chase area to place the space. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. On the Options Bar.4 Press Esc. enter Chase. In the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. right-click. 10 In the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 6 Enter VG. expand Spaces. select the space. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. For Limit Offset.

and click OK. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the next exercises. select Space Tag With Volume. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan. All spaces in the view are tagged. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. under Loaded Tags. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area.Bounding elements (such as walls. ceilings. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 15 Press Esc. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. floors. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and maximize the view. 17 Type ZF. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.

Zoning is highlighted. under Spaces.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. it is automatically added to the Default zone. which removes the space from the Default zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In this exercise. click Training Files. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. click View ➤ Zones. click Reference. indicating that it’s the active view. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After a space is placed in an area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. To display space reference lines. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 3 Right-click in the System Browser. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.

7 Close the file with or without saving it. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The Zone tool is active. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and verify the zones in the System Browser. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and Electrical 220 spaces. click Reference. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. To display space reference lines. the Edit Zone tab displays. and a new zone is created. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 4 In the drawing area. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and click OK. you assign spaces to a zone. click Training Files. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Using the Edit Zone tab. select Occupiable. indicating that it’s the active view.5 In the System Browser. and modify the zone properties. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. double-click 121 Cafeteria. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. select Computer Lab 222.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that the space is occupiable. and click Finish Editing Zone. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Spaces. Instruction 221. Next. The graphic in the System Browser updates.Zoning is highlighted. As you do this. under Energy Analysis. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone.

type VG. To view the zone in the drawing area. Click OK. 5 With the drawing area active. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Expand HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. select HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction.In the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .

In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.West .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. You activated zone visibility in the views.Zoning. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). To display space reference lines. expand 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. 9 In the System Browser.West . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Area B. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . for Name. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. enter 2 . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.TIP After you finish editing the zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning is highlighted. under Spaces. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser. and click OK. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. under Identity Data. click Reference. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Training Files. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 11 Close the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.

Select Attached End. click in the Level 2 .Zoning view. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view.Zoning view to activate it. 9 With the Add Space tool active. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 8 In the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .5 Click in the Level 1 . zoom out. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 Press Esc.Zoning floor plan.

and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Front. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name Value. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.Zoning to make it the active view. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. click the corner where the Top. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .Zoning view. enter Lounge . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. double-click Level 1 .rvt. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog.East. you verify the building. space. and zone information. click Training Files. on the ViewCube. and click OK. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the zone tag. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.

verify that Wireframe is selected. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Using the Highlight tool. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. Click (Highlight). With 109 Lounge selected. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Next. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you isolate the space. and select 109 Lounge. click (Isolate). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.

Next. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and in the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that <Building> is selected. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and then click OK. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and click OK. For People. For Construction Type. and then click OK. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. click . For Electrical Loads. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. scroll down in the left pane. ■ ■ ■ Next. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. click . select Lounge/Recreation. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the space information displays for the selected space. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. and in the People dialog. select 1_South_Lounge. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type.■ On the Details tab. Below the list of spaces and zones. select 109 Lounge.

you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.00 °F : N/A is specified. and air changes per hour. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. click (Shading). This indicates the outdoor air per person. This indicates the heating set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. cooling air temperature. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. heating air temperature. This indicates the cooling set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and other room-bounding components. floors.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge.00 °F : 54. For Heating Information. verify that 74. and dehumidification set point. outdoor air per area. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that 70. roofs. For Cooling Information. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Below the list of spaces and zones. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and humidification set point. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.00 °F : 90.00 °F : N/A is specified. Next. verify that <Building> is selected.

17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. for Number.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Because this is an unoccupied space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. select Plenum. click Cancel. open MEP . For Offset. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 212P. Click OK. select Level 3. Under Energy Analysis. enter 0. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Name. 15 In the Project Browser. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select Plenum. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

is selected. click in the Value field. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. for Energy Data. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. space. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select School or University. In this exercise. double-click Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and zone information. For Location. under Energy Analysis.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and verify that the space has replaced the void. enter 03101. for City. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Edit. and select space Plenum 212P. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. you verified building. For Postal Code. verify that Manchester. On the Place tab. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.rvt. NH. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .Space Plan.

verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). this option adjusts the times automatically. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that Level 1 is selected. If. click in the Value column. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Space Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Export Complexity. select Specified. ft. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. enter 150 Btu/h. For People. Click OK twice. In order to select a space. click Edit. verify that 1' 0" is specified. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. right-click. For Sliver Space Tolerance. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. and click OK. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Specified. verify that New Construction is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). ■ In the Type Properties dialog. for Values. For Project Phase. select Heated and cooled.Audio Visual. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. and then click . For Ground Plane. For Condition Type. or neither. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and click Element Properties. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Values. select Library . a cooling load. select space Library 219. Select Area per person. ■ On the Weather tab. for Building Service. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. and click OK. For Building Construction. 8 In the drawing area. enter 200 Btu/h. both. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Volume Computations. and enter 50 sq. you need to select this option.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Latent. For Sensible.

click Information). for Values. and click OK. verify that <Building> is specified. and under Heating Information. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. click Calculate. verify that School or University is selected. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Revit MEP stores this information as project information. select Actual. You should correct the space error in the building model. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Click OK twice. There should be no warnings displayed. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. select Actual. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . is specified. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Next. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. select 219 Library. For Building Construction. verify that Manchester. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Location. click Edit. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For Electrical Loads. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 12 Click the Details tab. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. NH. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Under Power. and can be modified here. Select the space associated with the warning. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You have verified the building information. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.■ ■ ■ Click OK. For Building Service. for Values.

In this exercise. space. 17 In the loads report. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. or zone information. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. and a loads report displays. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 16 After you review the loads report. under Energy Analysis. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click OK.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.Space Plan. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . select HVAC Zones. or make any changes to the model. For Color Scheme. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 15 Review the loads report for project. 3 In the drawing area. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. click Training Files. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. select 219 Library. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. space. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and zone information for the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. weather. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

in 1-ton increments. select the color scheme legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. select Tonnage Range. and click OK. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. under Schemes.5 Zoom in to the legend. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The new scheme displays in the view.

74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 11 Using the method learned previously. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. select Spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. select Spaces. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. more category options are available. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. enter Space Airflow Schedule. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Select Schedule building components. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Click OK. For Phase. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select New Construction. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Name. for Select available fields from. In this exercise.12 Close the file with or without saving it.Space Fill is the active view. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise.

add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Fields. and then click Conditional Format. and then click . Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Select Ascending. and then select Hidden field. Select Formula. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Level. select HVAC. click (Browse). select Air Flow. For Formula. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. for Formula. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. ■ Click Calculated Value.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. enter . In the Calculated Value dialog. select Airflow Delta. In the Fields dialog.■ Under Available fields. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Type. and Blank line. select Level. Header. For Then by. For Discipline. Click OK. select Number. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Not Between. enter Airflow Delta. and click OK.

6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . In later exercises. and click OK. Under Conditions to Use. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Color dialog. In the next lesson. select red. a view opens that contains the selected space. verify that Show is highlighted. In this exercise. For Background Color. click the color swatch. ■ The schedule displays. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. right-click to access schedule properties. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. Click OK twice. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model.■ ■ ■ For Value. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.

78 .

You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). 79 . IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After completing the air systems lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will create supply air systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Then. you modify air terminal parameters. After system creation. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. As you place the air terminals. In this lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.rvt. and scroll to space 223.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.

enter 425 CFM. for Flow. 17 Move the cursor down. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then select both Copy and Multiple. type 12. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Also. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. The schedule updates with the new flow data. the hosted elements are updated as well. select the diffuser.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and select Supply Diffuser . NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.Rectangular Face Round Neck . verify that Constrain is cleared. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 9 On the Placement panel. 13 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. If the host element is modified or moved. and then press Esc to end the command. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 15 On the Options Bar. as shown. click Place on Face. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .

28 On the Placement tab. Next. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 24 In the Open dialog. select one of the diffusers. 22 In the drawing area. 29 Place 2 diffusers. as shown. 27 Select Return Diffuser . select each of the 5 supply diffusers. click Yes. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. clear Leader. As you place the return diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. click Place on Face. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.rfa.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 In the drawing area. 21 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. and click Open.

34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. and click to select the lines. for Reference. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select one of the return diffusers. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click Yes. 31 In the alert dialog. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. Level. 32 In the Project Browser. select Strong Reference. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . under Other.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

and click OK. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Constraints ➤ Offset. enter 9' 0"2750. ■ ■ For the end point. For the start point. click the Level 1 line. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . Verify that the measured distance is 9'. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. 44 Zoom in to space 115.

You then create the logical connection between the system components. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. click Training Files. and click View ➤ Systems. However. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components.HVAC Plan . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. In this exercise. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. the space crossing lines display. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After creating the logical connection. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Press Esc. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. When you highlight a space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including energy analysis. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. right-click the title. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Connect Into. review the Number of Elements. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. System Name. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 11 In the drawing area. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. As you add diffusers to systems. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. On the Options Bar. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and Flow value. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 12 In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. the number of elements is updated. 15 Click Cancel.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 6 Keep the System Browser open.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser.17 Using the method learned previously. and the system connects them. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. which updates the name in the System Browser. under Mechanical. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Identity Data. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 25 Click OK. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. for System Name. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. the air terminals are the children. 18 Click OK. Rename the system Next. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click OK. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 26 Click Finish Editing System. In this exercise. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. for Mark. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. In this exercise.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and display solution 1. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. select the upper left diffuser.HVAC Plan.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. Also. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 4 In the drawing area.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Solution Type. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. the Network type provides several solutions. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. which provides various layout tools. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. A Generate Layout tab displays. the space crossing lines display. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. In this case. select Network. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

enter 3'. you’ll get an error in a later step. click Modify. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Flex Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Select Branch. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Offset. Click OK. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Settings. For Duct Type. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Duct Type.Round. For Offset.7 On the Options Bar. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. as shown. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or manually modify the duct. as is the elbow itself. For example. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.11 Click Finish Layout.

select Duct Color Fill . Usually. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. but not all values are used in this view. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. If the entire network does not highlight. select By View. Using a flow-based color scheme. and click OK. for Values Displayed. and then click OK. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. and equipment. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend.Flow. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. The first time you press Tab. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click to select it. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. under Graphics. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. highlight a segment of the main duct.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. for Color Scheme. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. thus it is not part of the system. fittings. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. a disconnection exists. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and press Enter. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and on the Options Bar. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. for Flow. select Duct Color Fill . under Mechanical .Airflow. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 26 Click OK. 20 In the drawing area. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the color scheme legend. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. for Schemes. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. and click OK. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.Velocity. select one of the diffusers in the system. select the WSHP. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 .

select Calculated Size Only. Click OK. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Select Restrict Height. and enter . and select 16". you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. highlight a segment of the duct. Under Constraints. Select the upper segment of main duct. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click to select it. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). click Cancel. for Branch Sizing. Select Only. and drag it to the right. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.08 in-wg/100ft. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system.

and pressure loss. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. pressure. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Using this tool. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Use the information that displays (flow. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. static pressure.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. click Training Files.NOTE As you inspect a system. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 35 Click Finish. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. also known as the critical path. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt.

7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select the WSHP. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and click Draw Duct.

8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. right-click the connector grip. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 15 On the ViewCube. and click Draw Duct. for Offset. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Front. double-click MEP . select 9' 10 1/2". click the corner where the Top. NOTE When drawing duct. select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.3D MEP. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.

17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Also. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. the color fill indicates the flow value. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. it is considered a closed loop. in space 115. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 19 In the drawing area. 22 Using the same method. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. The ductwork is automatically created. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

You can ignore the warning. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. and select the top left diffuser. 25 Press Esc.

32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 30 Press Esc twice. and then click Modify. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and click to select it.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.

verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 40 Using the same method. and click OK. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. under Constraints. select a segment of the main duct. such as a plenum. under Mechanical . The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. and then click OK. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Flow. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.

109 . you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Then. including 2 base mounted pumps. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. and a cooling tower located on the roof. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. on level 3 of the building model. click Training Files. you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.rvt. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.

6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.High Efficiency .HVAC Plan . verify that Wall faces is selected.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. and select WSHP .Left Return . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 7 On the Options Bar. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. in corridor 328.2-6 Tons . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Horizontal . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.

click the top edge of the WSHP. as shown. 10 Select the WSHP. as shown. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. click the dimension. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and enter 2'. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to place the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. and in the Type Selector.8 Click the corridor wall face. verify that the WSHP is still selected.

as shown. select the 2 WSHPs. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Offset. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Water Flow. Click OK. Under Mechanical. enter 9'. and click to place it in the mechanical room.14 Click Modify. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter 12 GPM.

Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. including flow and pressure. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You can create pipes to connect system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.HVAC Plan . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Unlike logical connections (systems). and click View ➤ Piping.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. right-click the Systems column heading. 5 In the System Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design is highlighted.Mech 330). 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Creating a Piping System | 115 . where it is easier to review the information. indicating that it’s the active view. analyses cannot be performed. but without a corresponding system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.rvt.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 10 On the Options Bar. while pressing Ctrl. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. This display indicates that the system is selected. 12 In the drawing area. select the boiler. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. select the 2 WSHPs. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Therefore. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. and the Edit System tool is not active. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. for System Name. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. As you assign equipment to systems. Notice that on the Options Bar. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

You have created the hydronic return system. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 17 On the Options Bar. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.Design. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. for System Name.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and select the cooling tower. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.HVAC Plan . 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof .13 Click Finish Editing System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. under Design ➤ HVAC .

and bypasses the cooling tower. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). In cooling mode. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and click OK. 29 Right-click CHWS. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and click Expand All. 23 Close the roof plan view. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 28 Using the same method. and click Select. 26 Click Finish Editing System. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 25 Select the boiler. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). In heating mode. indicating the logical connection. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. expand the Hydronic Return system category.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . you can view several parameters.In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. You also manually modify the layout path as required. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click OK. 32 In the System Browser. and click OK. enter 18 GPM. under Mechanical. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Column Settings. expand Piping. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. including the flow rate and size of the component. for Water Flow. and click Properties.

You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then the Select a System dialog displays. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and click to select it. you can place the cursor over a system component. A system preview displays in red. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 10 Click OK. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. the boiler. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. When you draw a box to select components. and click OK. select Mechanical Equipment. 5 In the Filter dialog. press Tab to highlight the system. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose.Design is highlighted. click Check None. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Mech 330). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. select CHWR. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 9 In the Select a System dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. click Training Files. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.

verify that Solutions is selected. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. structural beams. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. enter 1' 6''. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 13 Click Cancel. click Settings. For Inset. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select Perimeter. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. duct. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. or architectural components. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. It does not reference the architecture. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type.11 On the Options Bar. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. to display the path with thinner lines. 19 In the drawing area. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. and press Tab 3 times.16 Click Finish Layout. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the flow for one WSHP is 18. With each Tab. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. and the flow for the other is 12. 17 Optionally.

20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 22 Select the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and access its instance properties. and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 23 Under Mechanical. under Mechanical. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 24 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM.

and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. click Edit System. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . 27 On the System Tools panel.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. Logically. double-click Level 1 . Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you physically close the CHWR loop. which propagates flow throughout the system. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 28 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Number of Elements is now 8. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. On the Options Bar.Design. Next. 32 Click Finish Editing System.

under Mechanical. select a WSHP. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 38 Using the same method. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and click Cancel. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 35 Using the drag control. access its instance properties. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.

For Inset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.40 In the Select a System dialog. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 1' 6''. enter 0''/12''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. Click Settings. select Perimeter 1 of 5. and then click OK. select CHWS. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 41 Click OK. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. For Slope.

select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 47 In the drawing area. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 46 Click Modify. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 48 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. In a later exercise.

you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. 51 Click Finish Layout. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Either relocate the system components. select a different layout solution.50 Using the same method. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. or offset elevations are incorrect. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. or manually modify the pipe. To create the piping system. Add piping to close the supply loop.

Design is highlighted. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and the return pipes are magenta. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.rvt.HVAC Plan . click Training Files.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. As you work in the training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . double-click 3D HVAC Building. as shown. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 6 Press Delete. 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. and press Esc to clear the selection.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

and the lower one is secondary. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and click OK. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 12 In the 3D view. The connections are automatically created. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). select the return pipe riser. 13 In the plan view. select the boiler. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe.

and you select 1 connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. enter 1' . for Offset.In a plan view. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and press Enter. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.7''. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 2'.

18 Press Esc twice. and click OK. and select it. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and the appropriate fittings are created. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. as shown. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 19 In the plan view. As you place piping runs that are close together. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. select the primary base mounted pump.

click to connect to the pump. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the bottom connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click Draw Pipe.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 28 Press Esc. and when the connector point displays. 29 If necessary. 27 Move the cursor to the right. you select the tee fitting. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click the minus symbol. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 33 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the discharge connector. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. enter 4'.

zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. as shown. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.

and click Draw Pipe. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. for Offset. ■ Move the cursor down. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 9' 6''. and click to create the pipe. and press Enter. right-click the bottom control on the tee. type 1'.

and click Element Properties. Next. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . you validate the flow through the system. right-click.37 Click Modify. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. You now have a closed loop system.

40 Click Cancel. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. When you create the pumps in parallel. 48 In the plan view. The flow is being propagated through the piping. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 46 Press Esc. for Cooling Water Flow. 44 In the 3D view. 41 Using the same method. and click OK. under Mechanical. In the Instance Properties dialog. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the cooling tower. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 42 Click OK. notice that under Mechanical. 43 Press Esc.50 or 50% of the Flow. right-click. view the properties for the secondary pump. and click Element Properties. as shown. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. under Mechanical. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . the value is 0 GPM. Connect the cooling tower Next.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

Adding Valves In this exercise. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. When the valve is open. click Training Files. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). select the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and close the dialog. the water bypasses the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler.50 In the 3D View. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM.

Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 8 Press Esc twice. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The bypass valve is closed by default.Design is highlighted. and select Ball Valve . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. as shown.HVAC Plan .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Valves | 143 . indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.

14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 12 Select Ball Valve .

You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Element Properties.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). In heating mode. and select Ball Valve . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 19 Using the same method. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. right-click. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Adding Valves | 145 . Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. 20 Select the bypass valve. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. under Mechanical. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.

You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.22 Using the method you just learned.Design is highlighted. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. as shown.rvt. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. Initially. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.HVAC Plan . Sizing Pipe In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.

for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . Sizing Pipe | 147 . and click OK. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.Size. select Pipe Color Fill .Flow. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. and click OK. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.

and enter 2. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). for Branch Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.25 FT/100ft. Under Constraints. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Select And. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. enter 5 FPS.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 13 Press Esc. and click to select the branch. select Friction. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Click OK. and for Velocity.

rvt. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Using the System Inspector. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspecting the System In this exercise.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Either relocate the system components. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System | 149 . click Training Files. pressure. select a different layout solution.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.

The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. This information helps you modify the system design. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . flow. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). An inspection flag reports the section number. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. and pressure information including pressure loss.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. as required. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.67 psi. for Fluid Temperature.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.89 psi. and the Pressure Loss is 1. you need to validate them. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. and click OK. and to size pipe. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. targeting those systems that need attention. the Static Pressure is 7. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. select 90° F. In this exercise. 9 Using the same method. as shown. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. inspect Section 6 again.88 psi.

These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). In the System Browser. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. If you place components without assigning them to a system. 4 In the System Browser. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. and for pipe sizing. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. and click View.HVAC Plan . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.Design. double-click Level 1 . 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.Design.HVAC Plan . 9 Right-click CHWS.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. the pipe is associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and double-click Level 3 . all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you assign components to a system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. For example. 7 In the System Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Warnings display. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. thus assigning the components to a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. As you learned when placing components. right-click the Systems titlebar. After you have assigned all components to systems. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and click Show to view all of the system components.

confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and confirm unassigned system components. and select Level 3 . 14 Using the methods that you learned. otherwise.TIP If you have multiple views open. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . right-click Hydronic Return.HVAC Plan .Design floor plan. 13 Right-click CHWR. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 12 In the System Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. and click Expand All. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 10 Using the same methods. expand the Unassigned folder. click Close. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Define required lighting. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. enter 1. For Material. Select Correction Factor. select Wiring Types. select 75. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . and demand factors that are applied in the design.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. speeding up the design phase. select 90. distribution systems. You also add a wiring type. select Copper. enter THHN. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Copper. ■ ■ For Factor. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Click New Correction Factor.04. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). As you place components and create circuits.Wire Sizes. ■ ■ For Material. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. expand Wiring . For Temperature Rating. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. click Training Files. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Click OK. wiring. For Temperature.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ For Value. Click OK three times. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Custom Colors. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. select Red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Background Color. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.

you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create power loads. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. power circuits. as you place lighting fixtures. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create a panel schedule. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Use the System Browser to check your design. Then. 167 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. First. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select the color for Less Than 20.00 fc. You can create additional color schemes. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.rvt. click Training Files. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. for the Spaces Category.00 fc. click (Open). ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. Under Scheme Definition. In the Color dialog. select Average Estimated Illumination. select Orange. select the color legend. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. By using orange as the color for this range. for Basic Colors. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Lighting Color Fill view is open. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.

5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.277. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The red field will clear once the +/.7 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 8 In the Project Browser. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Lighting Ceiling plan. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . 13 Click the Level 2 . and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. which is the lowest value in the specified range.5 fc range. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.5 fc range is satisfied. zoom to space Library 219.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.

170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 23 Click OK. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 25 On the Options Bar. the fixtures will move accordingly. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 20 Select the lighting fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 18 Click to place the fixture. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Press ESC to end the command.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 30 On the Options Bar.

32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . and for Category. select Lighting Fixtures. 36 In the Filter dialog. click Check None.277V.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK.

Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . click the ceiling grid line as shown.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 42 In the drawing area. select Multiple Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar.277V. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. The lighting delta is satisfied.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.

you modify the light fixture IES files.45 Press ESC to end the command.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . click Training Files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the next exercise.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting Color Fill plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 2 Tile the views as shown.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. scroll to view space space Library 219. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Plan. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.

for Apparent Load. select T5 [HO]. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. enter . Under Electrical. Note the lighting type has changed to F14.85. In the Name dialog. for Ballast Loss Factor. for Lamp. Under Photometrics. for Color Preset. select Luminous Flux. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.00 VA. select 463T5_S. specify 15000. enter F15. click the value for Light Loss Factor. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.277V and click OK.93. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. and click OK.00 lm. Click OK. ■ Click OK twice. click the value for Initial Color. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. ■ Click Apply. Under Identity Data. In the Select File dialog. select Xenon and click OK. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. enter 162. enter . Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. Under Photometrics. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. click the value for Initial Intensity. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. for Type Mark.ies and click Open. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 .

9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . click Check None. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 10 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category.

Press Delete. 15 In space Library 219. Note the lighting delta updates again. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture.

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

click Training Files. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 2 In the drawing area. Placing Switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the next exercise. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Junction Boxes. Junction Boxes. click (Open).rvt. junction boxes.Press Delete. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and Receptacles | 183 . you add switches. and receptacles to your design. Placing Switches. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.

8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 185 .NoLoad. Select Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.rfa and click Open.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Junction Boxes. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

enter 9’0”. for Mark.14 Press ESC to end the command. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. Under Electrical.Offset. 15 Select the junction box. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK twice. note the Number of Poles is 1. NOTE When entering values. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter JB-1NL. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 21 In the drawing area. In the Type Properties dialog. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. for Level 2 .

Select Size. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 26 In the System Browser. Space Name. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Number. Placing Switches. 23 In the System Browser. 24 For any column. NOTE If necessary. Expand General. Junction Boxes.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Voltage. right-click and click Column Settings. and Number of Elements. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. and Receptacles | 187 . dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Click OK. Distribution System. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Load.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 31 Close the System Browser. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’.

and Receptacles | 189 . 38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches. 40 On the Options Bar. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Junction Boxes. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Copy and Multiple.

42 Move the cursor down.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . move the cursor along the wall.

Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). zoom to the space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).rvt. click Training Files. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Adding wiring to a project is optional. click (Open). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and work toward the higher voltage. 2 In the drawing area. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter PP-2B. for Distribution System. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Click OK.Loads.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 120/208 Wye. for Max. enter 20.Surface: 100A. 15 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the panelboard. select 480/277 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. For Panel Name. 14 Select the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .

17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . For Panel Name. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 20 In the drawing area. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Click OK. for Max. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. zoom to space Instruction 221.Loads. #1 Pole Breakers. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. enter LP-2B. which is the logical connection between the elements. enter 20. Click OK. 23 In the Filter dialog. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. click Check None. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.28 Press ESC to end the command. 33 Select the switch on the right.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.

Click OK. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. enter 2. click (Open). Next you create circuits without showing wire. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 41 In the Filter dialog. select Wires. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. and for Category.Loads.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click Check None. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 38 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. except without wire. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Hot Conductors.

right-click on the Systems heading. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. expand Power. click Training Files. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 13 In the System Browser. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Distribution System. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Expand Electrical. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.rvt. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and Voltage Drop are selected. 2 In the drawing area. and verify that Load. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Rating. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Voltage. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Click OK. and then expand circuit 1. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing.

20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. Click OK. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 30 Close the System Browser. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it.

35 Press ESC to end the command. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click Yes. for Type Mark. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. enter FR4. Click Tags. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. under Identity Data. click below the first one to place it. click Edit Type. 47 In the drawing area. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Click OK. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 40 Click OK twice. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. note the label parameters and click Cancel.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.

select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. for File Name. 52 In the Save As dialog.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. and for Category. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Click OK. Click Save. select Lighting Fixture Tags. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Next you create a switch system. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. and click Apply. Click OK. Click OK. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 56 In the Filter dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only.rfa. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. enter a comma. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Break. For Circuit Number. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None.

6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. click (Open). 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . click Training Files. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.rvt. under Electrical Lighting. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for Switch ID. Click OK. enter a. 2 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.

enter b. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. for switch ID. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK.Lighting.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. under Electrical . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.

Next you create a circuit and size wire. select Electrical Fixtures. 7 In space Electrical 220. and data systems. click (Open). select the PP-2B panel.26 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 2 In the drawing area. lighting. click Training Files. click Check None. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Circuits are used for power. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 4 In the Filter dialog. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and for Category. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups).rvt.

select Hook Wire Tick Mark. enter 2.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 19 Click OK. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Open. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. and in the drawing area. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Long Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. under Electrical . 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. select Wiring. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 15 In the Load Family dialog. Click OK.rfa.Loads. and click Element Properties. 13 Select the wire again. for Hot Conductors.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 22 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads | 209 . Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and click to select the circuit. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns.26 Press Delete. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 29 In space Instruction 221. in space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 28 In the drawing area.

Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 31 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 In the Electrical space. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Next you balance the loads for your design. select panel LP-2B. 2 In the drawing area. zoom to space Electrical 220. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally.rvt. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Open. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.

Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#10. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Scroll down. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.3712 VA. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 1-#12. enter 30A. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Under Electrical-Loads. 6 Click OK. Phase B 3636 VA. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 12 Select panel PP-2B. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. for Rating. Click OK. and Phase C . 1-#12. 1-#10.3616 VA). 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . B. 14 Close the warning dialog.

Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. for Rating. click (Open). and click OK. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical . Click OK. and click OK.rvt. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Loads. 17 Close the warning dialog. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.Loads. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. for Rating.15 Select panel PP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. Select PP-2B. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. enter 30A. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click Training Files. enter 25A. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical .

select Bold and Italic. for Font Size. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. Under Header Text. 5 In the Project Browser. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. and open E601 .Panel Schedules. under Other. 7 Select the schedule. Under Header Text.rvt. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 4 Close the report. select Berlin Sans FB. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. expand Sheets (all). enter 3/32. 11 Click OK twice. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. enter 1/8. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. for Appearance. for Font Size.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. click Training Files. click Edit. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). 6 In the Project Browser. Under Body Text. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. for Font. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.

There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. each with a load of 180VA. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Expand Unassigned. In the System Browser. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. select space Lounge 212. press TAB once. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. Checking Your Design | 215 . 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.

18 Select panel LP-2C. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. for Panel. zoom to space Electrical 214. 16 Close the details dialog. select MDP-1. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 15 In the dialog.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 20 On the Options Bar. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. under Warnings. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 In the drawing area.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

In this lesson. 4 In the Name dialog.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you create a PVC pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and click OK.Sanitary. and click Properties. In this exercise. click Duplicate. right-click PVC . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Design ➤ Floor Plans. in addition to loading existing families. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.rvt. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. planning is critical to a successful design.Design is open. Adding a pipe size. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and verify that Level 1 . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. type PVC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 219 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Vent.

PVC . select Tee. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 For System Type. 10 On the Selection panel.PVC . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 27 For the new pipe size. In the Project Browser. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.PVC . refer to Revit MEP Online Help. enter 5/8''. 22 Click New Size. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 24 For Inside Diameter. select Branch.5 In the Type Properties dialog. Tee. 25 For Outside. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. and click OK. for Material. enter 10°. select Tee Vent . 6 Click OK.Sch 40 . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Offset.rfa.DWV: Standard. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 21 In the right pane. click Training Files.Sch 40 . Cross. 13 In the right panel. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 .Vent is listed. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 In the left pane.0''. Tap. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . select Plastic. for Nominal. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Sanitary. select None. 26 Click OK. and click Main. click Modify. enter 27/32''.DWV. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 1/2''. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 15 For System Type. under Mechanical. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . enter -4' . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.DWV: Standard. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select Sanitary. click Pipe Settings. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. under Pipe Types. PVC .

Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. including plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. add a hot water heater. 221 . and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. 1 urinal. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. click Training Files. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE To identify a space name and number. including the men’s room (space Male 107). move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. you add 2 toilets.

Wall Mounted. as shown. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 1 wall-mounted urinal.1.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. and 3 sinks. under Water Closet . 4 On the Element panel. 5 On the Placement panel. in the Type Selector.Flush Valve . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.6 gpf. against the left wall. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select Public .

) 8 Press Esc.7 Click to place another toilet. and press Esc.Wall Hung. (Again. under Urinal . above the first in the standard toilet space. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. use the reference line to center the fixture. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . zoom in closer.

Rectangular. 14 Click Modify.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. select 5''x5'' Strainer . under Floor Drain . you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 12 On the Placement panel.2'' Drain. click Place on Face. In placing the fixture.

and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and click View ➤ Piping. click Training Files. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and review the components listed under this system.rvt. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. right-click in the System Browser table heading. a urinal. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a floor drain.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

Only plumbing fixtures are selected. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 8 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and click OK.Plumbing Plan .Design is open.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 6 In the plan view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 In the Project Browser. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. for System Name. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. You include the bathroom space number in the name. If you deselected the drain. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 On the Edit System panel. 11 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. enter Sanitary 107. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 13 In the Systems Browser. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Sanitary. so the Create Sanitary System is available.

select one of the components in the system. A preview of the piping layout displays. a toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for example. select Sanitary 107. as shown. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base is placed. at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog. and click OK.

26 On the Options Bar. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Branch. and for Offset. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select 4''. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Slope. The default settings are automatically modified. and modify it to meet project requirements. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 27 Click Modify. 23 For Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter -1' 0''. 24 In the left pane.19 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. enter -4'-0”. 25 On the Options Bar. and click Settings. 21 On Options Bar. for Solution Type. You accept this suggested solution. for Diameter. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and click OK. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Main. enter -1' 0''. select Intersections.

Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

31 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

and check the slope control. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 38 Close the file with or without saving it.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . you continue with the work from the last exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. adding sinks in the men’s room. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

5 On the Placement panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 .Public. select 22''x22'' .Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Rectangular. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .rvt. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . in the Type Selector. click Training Files. 4 On the Element panel. under Lavatory . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). as shown. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.

and press Enter to create a second sink. On the Options Bar. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. TIP When entering dimensions. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. For example. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Modify. enter 2' 4''. 8 Select the sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line.

13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. click Finish Editing System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 16 On the Edit System panel. 12 In the drawing area. click Add To System. Press Esc. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 Click the 3 sinks.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser. and press Enter to create the third sink. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.

right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). use the ViewCube to orient the view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 In the 3D view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. as shown. 21 Select the tee. double-click 3D Plumbing. under Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views. 20 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 22 In the plan view.In the System Browser. with the tee fitting selected. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.

23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.6''. 26 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 27 Click Modify. for Slope. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 2' . and click Apply. press Spacebar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. In this example. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset.

click to place the fitting. under Wye 45 Deg Double .Sch 40 . select Standard. and when the vertical center line displays. 29 In the Type Selector. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 32 Select the double wye fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.PVC .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 31 Click Modify. 30 In the 3D view.DWV.

enter 1'. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 6''. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view. and press Enter. for Offset. In the next steps. and click Draw Pipe. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. on the Options Bar. right-click the right connector. 34 Press Esc. zoom in to the double wye fitting.33 With the fitting selected. 36 In the section view.

which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 40 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. as shown. 42 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 41 Using the same method.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

47 Move the cursor down. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 49 Using the same method. enter 6''. right-click the bottom connector. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 46 In the section view. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe. and press Esc. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 48 Click Modify.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping.

Sch 40 . select the P-Trap on the left. 52 In the plan view.PVC . 51 In the Type Selector.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. under Trap P . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 54 Click Modify. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 53 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . select Standard. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 56 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.DWV. 55 In the 3D view.

57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. Select the double wye pipe on the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 58 Using the same method. Move the cursor to the left. enter 6''. and press Enter. Click Modify. connect the right sink to the double wye. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. select the left P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click in the plan view.

Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the section of pipe you just drew. select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. Press Esc. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . click Finish to select the recommended solution. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select a proposed solution. as shown. under Pipe Types. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. In the Type Selector.■ In the 3D view.

62 On the Options Bar. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. for Slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. and verify the slope. click Finish. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.rvt. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

10 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . select the vertical stack. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Plumbing Plan . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Design. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. as shown.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Floor level line. select Standard. 7 On the Selection panel. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3 In the Section view. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and click the intersection to place the fitting.DWV. select the elbow fitting on the right. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Modify.Overall. 5 Select the tee. right-click the top connector.Design. 9 In the Type Selector. and click Draw Pipe. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click to draw the pipe. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .PVC .

PVC .DWV. under Plug . enter 1'-0”. 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. for Offset. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 18 In the plan view.Sch 40 . 17 In the Type Selector.11 Click Modify. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. select Standard. 15 Press Esc. 12 Select the fitting. 13 Click the rotate control once.

Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.19 Click Modify. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.rvt.

Overall. select Domestic Hot Water. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 9 In the left pane. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. select Domestic Cold Water. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and click OK. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 6 In the left pane. and sinks. 7 In the left pane. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Main. minimize the Sanitary system. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. for System Type. 15 In the plan view. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Branch. enter 9' 3''.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Plumbing Fixtures.Design ➤ 3D Views. draw a selection box to select the toilets. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Domestic Hot Water. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and for System Type. click Check None.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . and click Main. For Offset. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. if necessary. select Pipe Types: Water. double-click 3D Plumbing . 14 In the System Browser. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 17 In the Filter dialog. urinal. select Branch. select Pipe Types: Water.) 10 Click OK. For Offset. for System Type. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. expand Unassigned. 4 In the right pane.

In the System Browser. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 19 On the System Tools panel. click Finish Editing System. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 21 On the Edit System panel. For Flow Conversion Method. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. enter DCW 107. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. click Edit System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water.

30 In the plan view. select Water. connect the second toilet. and press Enter. as shown. 32 Move the cursor to the right. and click Draw Pipe. For Slope. under Pipe Types.25 Using the same method. and click to place the pipe. and click the connector. select the sink above the urinal. 37 On the Options Bar.2 7/8''. for Offset. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 36 Move the cursor to the left. and press Enter. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. for Offset. enter 10'. For Offset. enter 0”/12”. as shown. enter 4'0”. right-click the top DCW connector. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. select 3/4''. 31 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. click to the left of the urinal. 35 In the Type Selector. enter 3' . 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. enter 7''. 28 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.

select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click OK. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 42 In the Select Connector dialog. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 41 Select the top sink. 40 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor to the left.

you create the hot water system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.44 Using the same method. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. expand the Unassigned folder. and verify that Level 1 . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. while pressing Ctrl. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. select the 3 sinks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt.Overall. click Training Files. 6 In the plan view.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog. you edit the system to add equipment. 13 In the plan view. as shown. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. for System Name. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.6 Gallon. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 12 In the Type Selector. in the Unassigned folder. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. Default Domestic Hot Water. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. When designing systems. under Water Heater . the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 10 In the System Browser. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 14 Click Modify. Default Domestic Cold Water.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. and click OK. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. and click Edit System. In later steps. select 0. 15 In the System Browser.Tankless.

and on the Edit System panel. for Offset. 26 Move the cursor to the right. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 27 Click Modify. Offset: 4' 6''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. enter 1' 6''. and click the water main line. 24 Move the cursor up. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 23 On the Options Bar. right-click the middle left connector. as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. select the water heater. 19 Select the water heater. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. click Finish Editing System. and press Enter. and select Draw Pipe. enter 10’. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. 22 In the Type Selector. Slope: 0''/12''.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

as shown. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1' 6''. and for Offset. click Edit System. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and on the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. 35 On the Options Bar. select 4'-6''. 33 On the Edit System panel. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter 1''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 36 Move the cursor down. 30 On the System Tools panel. click Finish Editing System. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. enter 9' 0''. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and in the System Selector. for Diameter. select a sink.

39 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink. as shown. enter 2' 8''. 42 Click Modify. and press Enter. for Offset. enter 1’. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Move the cursor down.

43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You create a new pipe type.autodesk. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you can choose to save your work. After finishing each exercise. and click Duplicate. In this lesson. click Training Files. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. However. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.rvt. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In this tutorial.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. If the tutorial training files are not present. 2 Right-click Standard. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 267 . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.

For Pipe Type. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. For System Type. you create project parameters and work with schedules. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. and then click OK. duct. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. verify that 9' 0" is selected. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For System Type. For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Carbon Steel. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. verify that 9' 0" is specified. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. for Material. select Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . or architectural components. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 9 Click OK. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. However. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). and enter Fire Protection Wet. In this exercise. click Rename. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Main. In the next exercise. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. and click Properties. under Mechanical. Next. For Offset.

select Fire Protection. the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click Element Properties. select the upper half of the building. click Add. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Group parameter under. for Sprinkler Zone.rvt. under Fire Protection. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter Sprinkler Zone. 5 Click OK twice. select space Instruction 221 as shown. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. right-click. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. select Spaces. click Training Files. Under Categories. enter Zone 1.Design is highlighted. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.Fire Protection Plan . and then click OK. 8 Using a crossing window. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 6 In the drawing area.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. enter Zone 2. under Fire Protection. select Zone 1.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. including a calculated value parameter. and then access instance properties. and then click OK.rvt. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. for Sprinkler Zone. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that only Spaces are selected. 13 Using the same method. to which you add various parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. under Fire Protection. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Maximum Spacing. select Length. Obstructed-Combustible. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Group parameter under. select Spaces.Fire Protection Plan . select Feet and fractional inches. double-click on each column separator. Click OK. enter Light. and click Field Format. In the Maximum Spacing column. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . For Key name. 10 In the Format dialog. For Name. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Select Schedule keys.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click OK. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. enter 15. Click OK. click Add Parameter. For Rounding. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Maximum Spacing. The schedule displays. For Units. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 6 Using the same method. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data.Design is highlighted. 11 Click OK twice. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 On the Formatting tab. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 14 Select the new header. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Name. For Type of Parameter. select To the nearest 1'. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. select Fire Protection. click the Formatting tab. and on the ribbon.

Click OK. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. and press Enter. enter 130. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Ordinary. under Available fields. 16 Using the same method. For Name. enter Sprinkler Schedule. select Spaces. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column.

click Edit. select Sprinkler Zone. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Discipline. click . Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and click View Properties. under Other. and click Field Format. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Formula.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. For Rounding. For Then by. enter Minimum Sprinklers. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Click OK. select Fixed. for Sort by. and click OK. Select Header and Blank line. select Area. select Number. In the Fields dialog. select Level. For Type. for Sorting/Grouping. select Common. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Minimum Sprinklers. select 0 decimal place. For Units. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements.

right-click the schedule. select Minimum Sprinklers. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Hidden field. 27 In the drawing area. select Level equals Level 2. verify that Use default settings is selected. Under Field formatting. and then select Hidden field. for Filter by. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Grand totals. for Filter. For Fields. ■ In the Format dialog. For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Sprinkler Zone.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. and select Totals only. select Level. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 30 Click OK twice. click Edit. and then click Field Format. At the bottom of the dialog. For Then by (second instance). and click View Properties. select Number.

delete the word Maximum. and click View Properties. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and select Totals only. select Calculate totals. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and Count. for Fields. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Formatting tab. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Grand totals. double-click Type. select Sprinklers. For Category. select Count. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Embedded Schedule. under Other. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . for Available fields. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. System Name. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Embedded Schedule. click Edit. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. Under Field formatting.

This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). The parameter change is evident in the schedule. but their values are not determined. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. select Light. 52 Click OK. and click OK. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 48 In the floor plan. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 46 With the space still selected. for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. and access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. under Identity Data. 44 In the schedule. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Fire Protection Plan Design. under Identity Data. 50 Access the instance properties. select Ordinary. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. double-click FP . 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 41 In the plan view. As a result. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. you are actually editing information in a database of building information.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Unobstructed. 43 Click Cancel.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

rvt. you will understand the process. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. click Training Files. After finishing each exercise. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. As you place the sprinklers.autodesk. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you can choose to save your work. As you create the system. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. However. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. go to http://www. At the end of this tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. By following the recommended workflow. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. 279 .

the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. After placing the initial sprinkler. When this happens. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 3 In the Project Browser. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and click to place 3 sprinklers. 10 Press Esc twice. as shown.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 9 In space Instruction 202. select the sprinklers that you placed.Pendent . because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and select Sprinkler .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.

and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. and then press Esc. Also. Next. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 13 On the Options Bar. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. you place non-hosted sprinklers.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active.

for Offset. and 200C). 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Next. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. This number is determined in the schedule. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. you adjust the offset. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. specify a vertical offset. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .FP_Ceiling view. and press Enter. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 25 Click OK. under Constraints. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 18 Type WT. move the cursor to the right. 17 In the Project Browser. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. For Number. Notice that the schedule updates. and click Element Properties.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 14' 6". enter 10' 6". and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.Fire Protection Plan . click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. enter 11. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0".Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. open Design ➤ FP . 200B. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 19 In the floor plan. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 29 Press Esc. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down.

indicating that it’s the active view.Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. After creating the logical connection. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.30 Close the file with or without saving it. 1 In the Project Browser. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Unlike logical connections (systems). click Training Files. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. and with piping (physical connection). you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In the next exercise. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Design is highlighted. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. However. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. In this exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

Creating a Piping System | 285 . Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. In the System Browser. click View ➤ Systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 5 Right-click the header. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. named Fire Protection Wet. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. as shown. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. and select Piping. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

select Branch. 12 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. For Offset. 11 With the system still selected. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. enter FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Next. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. place the cursor over a sprinkler. providing system editing tools. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. and a piping layout preview displays. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser.Wet is selected. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. In the left pane. 19 Click OK.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. for System Name. press Tab. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . system equipment. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. The Generate Layout tools are activated. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. click Settings. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 13 In the System Browser. 14 Click Finish Editing System. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. select an initial piping layout. and number of elements in the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and click Select. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. indicating the logical connection. verify that Main is selected. 15 In the drawing area. The Edit Piping System panel displays. and on the Options Bar. For Pipe Type. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and select the system.

When the layout is finished. and green represents branch lines). 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Place Base. 22 On the Options Bar. as shown.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. 23 For Offset. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. enter -12' 0". 24 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). In general. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. for Diameter. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. select 2". the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. click Solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell.

This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. On the Generate Layout panel. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. A (parallel movement control) displays. as shown. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. click Modify. 29 Click Finish Layout. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

33 Close the file with or without saving it. Next. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. and various manual pipe creation tools. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 32 If necessary.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Either relocate the system components. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. or manually modify the pipe. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. the Connect Into tool. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.

Design is highlighted. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Plan . 2 Zoom in. 3 If necessary. click Training Files.

for Solution Type. click Add To System. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Finish Editing System. 5 In the drawing area. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. or a system component to display system tools. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. mechanical equipment. verify that Network is selected. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. you can select the pipe or duct. air terminals. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 8 In the corridor. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 14 Close the System Browser. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 18 Click Finish Editing System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. radiators. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. verify that Solutions is selected. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. and pipe or duct is created. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 9 On the Edit System panel. and select solution 5. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 13 Click Finish Layout.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 12 On the Options Bar.

click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. and then press Esc. 28 In the drawing area. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.20 Open Design ➤ FP . and click Draw Pipe. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and then tile the views. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the sprinkler. 24 In the Piping Plan. right-click. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 29 Using the same method. 27 On the Options Bar. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. select 9'. 21 In the Piping Plan. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe.

Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 31 In the plan view. Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.

click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1/4" = 1'-0". you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. 4 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. indicating that it’s the active view. ■ 6 Press Esc. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. double-click on the section head to open the section view. for Scale.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. select 4". for Diameter.

and maximize the floor plan. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 23 Close the 3D view. as shown. and then tag the piping as shown. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 24 In the drawing area.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. The pipe diameter is modified. select 1 1/4". 26 Using the same method. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs).

The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. In this exercise. For additional practice. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you created a wet fire protection system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You added tags to pipes. In this tutorial. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 .

306 .

and click Rename. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click Training Files. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. 307 . callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. If the view included detail graphics. dependent views. matchlines. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and apply a view template. right-click Copy of Level 1. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click OK. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and view references.rvt. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans.

and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 9 Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 10 In the drawing area. and click Apply Default View Template. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. as shown. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. views and put them on the sheet. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. more focused. 6 In the Project Browser. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and then press Esc. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Using the same method. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. click Training Files. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views.rvt.

20 Select the upper view reference and. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 14 Click Finish Matchline./ ---). apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Click OK. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. for Target view. select Double Dash 5/8". click the current value. on the Options Bar. For Line Pattern. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select 11. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Line Weight. and click OK. 19 In the drawing area.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 13 Press Esc twice. In the Color dialog. and then press Esc. select black. 21 Using the same method. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .

as shown. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and zoom to each of the view references. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 27 Using the same method. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 25 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.

2 Zoom in. for View Name. select Plumbing Isometric. enter Plumbing Isometric . for View Classification. select Documentation. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and click Apply Default View Template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. 4 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.Domestic Water. and select the section box. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. right-click Plumbing Isometric . select Plumbing. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping.rvt. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The section crop lines no longer display. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Under Graphics. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click 3D Plumbing. For Sub-Discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Domestic Water.29 Close the file with or without saving it. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. For Default View Template. and click to select it.

For Pattern. select 3. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.9 Right-click. and then click OK. select Dash. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Click Apply. 12 Using the same method. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and click to select it. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.

13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). 14 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

17 Label the fixtures as shown. On the View Control Bar. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 18 Using methods learned previously. In the drawing area. On the View Control Bar. click Reveal Hidden Elements. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and click to select it. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. Right-click.Sanitary Waste. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements.Domestic Water view with detailing. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . press Tab 3 times.15 Press Esc. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements.

for Rounding. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 25 Press Esc twice. When the view is associated with a sheet.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. In the Format dialog. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 21 Click OK twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. you use a plan view to create a callout view. and click to place the spot slope annotation. as shown. and then place the callout view on a sheet. For Slope. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views | 315 . click on the Format value. select To the nearest 1/8". verify that Common is selected.

2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted.rvt. select 1/4"=1'-0''. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. click Training Files. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). indicating that it’s the active view. for Scale.

HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. using the same method. 13 In the Project Browser.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Creating Callout Views | 317 . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 5. Click OK. double-click M601 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. for Line Weight. drag it to the sheet. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Sheets (all).

The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Click OK. For Title on Sheet. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for View Name.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click Apply Default View Template. and select the viewport. 17 In the Project Browser. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. right-click the callout view. For Default View Template.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click Apply View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . enter Typical WSHP Detail. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and click Rename.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click OK. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. under Names. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 25 In the Project Browser. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the detail view.

and annotation to create a legend. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ work with model-based components. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. duct tags. 321 . linetypes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. symbols.

Creating Annotations In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. as shown. click Training Files. 8 With the text still selected. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).rvt. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

verify that Leader is cleared.9 Press Esc twice. 15 On the Options Bar. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. select a supply diffuser. a return diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. as shown. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and a segment of rectangular duct. a segment of round duct. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Creating Annotations | 323 . 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click Right Straight.

If necessary.rfa. and click Open. click Load.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. 17 Click Modify. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click OK.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 22 In the Tags dialog. under Category. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . clear Leader. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. for Ducts. 20 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.

specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 26 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. Creating Annotations | 325 . 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. and Attached End. as shown.25 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select Horizontal. Leader. 32 In the drawing area. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Free End. as shown.33 On the Options Bar. for Leader.

That’s because you changed a type property. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Creating Dimensions | 327 . Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. select Dot Open 1/16". select the last tag placed. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. you use temporary dimensions to locate. for Leader Arrowhead. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and all elements of that type are affected. lay out. 40 Using the method learned previously. 37 In the drawing area.36 Press Esc twice. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and lock lighting fixtures. not simply an instance property. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. select the dimension line. 12 Press Esc. On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.rvt. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. click Training Files. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then select the interior face of the wall. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture.

you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Creating a Legend | 329 . and offset them 8' from the wall.13 Using the same method. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . 16 Press Esc. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and notes. click the 3 interior locks on the line. enter 8'. Because the dimensions are locked. annotation symbols. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 19 Using the same methods. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.3 1/2"). add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. linework. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. and press Enter.

Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select Floor Plan. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . ■ 9 In the drawing area. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .rvt. click below the title to place the diffuser. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. enter Diffuser Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. select 1/4" = 1' -0". For View. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click in the drawing area. 10 Using the same method. For Scale. Click OK.8 Neck. click Training Files.

15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Legend | 331 . 14 In the drawing area. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. click next to the top diffuser. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.11 Press Esc.

RISE symbol for the copy start point. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The selected detail lines are now thin. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.DROP and its text note.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 26 Press Esc. 21 Press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.

Creating a Legend | 333 . and then click Modify. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 34 Using the method learned previously. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.30 Select Spot Elevation . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. enter E.

40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected.

click Training Files. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 335 . A detail callout that references another view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson. detail groups.113 East elevation view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. and text. A drafting view using detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

113 East on the sheet. 8 Using the same method. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Next.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. select each of the 2 panelboards.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click to place it. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. and then modify and align the views. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 5 In the drawing area. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . place Power Riser .

and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Activate View. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. for Title on Sheet.9 Press Esc. right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. giving the appearance of a single view. under Identity Data. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 13 Right-click. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. select the 113 North view. and click OK. and click Deactivate View.

17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. select the 113 East elevation view. right-click. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 22 Press Esc. and click Activate View. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. In the next exercise. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 21 Using the drag control.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. you add wiring to the diagram. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. as shown. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Select the Level 1 line. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

enter Electrical Power. 9 Beginning at the transformer.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. notice that there are no snaps active. click New. As you draw. In the Line Styles dialog. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. indicating that it’s the active view. expand Lines. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .rvt. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. In the New Subcategory dialog. select 6. Under Modify Subcategories. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. click Training Files. 8 On the Options Bar. 2 Close the Project Browser. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram.113 North view. and then click OK.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Line Weight. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . verify that Chain is selected. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). for Name.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). for Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. enter 1/8".

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. so that the result is as shown. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click Modify. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 28 Click above the cap.

select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.31 While pressing Ctrl. 33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. and then press Esc.36 Press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 3/32". 40 Press Esc. enter 0 0. for Offset.5. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 42 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You enter exact values for each line length.

You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.25. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. Press Esc. and then press Esc. select all 3 lines.125. you can ensure that they stay together. expand Groups ➤ Detail. enter Ground. and click OK. 46 In the Project Browser. enter 0 0. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. and press Enter. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 50 With the group selected. 47 In the drawing area. Using the same method. click on the length dimension value. while pressing Ctrl. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. for Name. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view.

draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 52 Select the detail group. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.51 Using the method learned previously. 54 Select the group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Name. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. In later exercises. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and will place it on sheet E01. and click Rename.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. click Training Files. and click OK. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 2 Right-click the copy. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.6 Select the section box. and then click the corner where the Top. and then press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . Back. 7 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge. click Home.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. right-click. select 3D Views. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. Under Names. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Walkthroughs. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. and click Apply View Template. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select 3D HVAC Iso. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser.

15 Using the same method.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Typical. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 19 Complete the text labels. Move the cursor down and to the left. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to specify the second leader point. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. (Right). as shown.

under Extents. select Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click on the crop region. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 25 Click OK. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and under Extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.To rotate and reposition a text label. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and then click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view.

For Scale. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Use detail lines to create a detail group. right-click the view name. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.29 In the drawing area. select the isometric view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Click OK. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Place a detail component. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select 3" = 1'-0". 30 Close the file with or without saving it.

6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 13 In the drawing area. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 9 Zoom in to the component. Click OK.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. as shown. as the rectangle start point. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. for Sub-Discipline. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. For View Classification. select Plumbing. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Documentation. click the point at the top of the drain. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 12 On the Element panel. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component.

click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. for Type.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the drawing area. 23 In the drawing area. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 20 Select 1. and then press Esc.P. 18 With the filled region still selected.I. 22 Click Modify. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete. and click OK. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. (Line).15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. select the filled region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. select C.

36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then click to select them.28 Click Modify. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.

38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 45 Using the method learned previously. 40 Click Finish Region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then press Esc.

and click OK.D. enter Flashing Membrane_F. select the Flashing Membrane group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 49 Click Modify. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 52 In the Create Group dialog. for Name. as shown.. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then click to select them. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . draw wide detail lines as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.

as shown. 61 Using the same method. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.55 Press Esc. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .

64 Press Esc twice. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 67 On the Options Bar. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 70 In the Keynotes dialog.62 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 71 Click Modify. and then click OK. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 72 If necessary. as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. and use the grips to resize the masking region. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing.

and click to specify the text insertion point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 76 To select the leader start point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 81 Select the text note. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the second leader point.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

88 In the drawing area. select the view title. 90 Press Esc. open P103 . and click to place it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc twice.

and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. Click Open. select 3. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. For Layers. For A-----NPP. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. For Import units. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i.rvt. For Colors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. click Training Files. for Line Weight. select Black and White. select Auto-Detect. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Visible. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. you import a CAD detail drawing. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view.dwg. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.

13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. select the viewport title. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. open P103 . and then press Esc. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 12 In the drawing area. 11 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.8 Type ZF.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful